‫األكاديمية العربية الدولية‬

‫األكادميية العربية الدولية‬

‫‪www.aiacademy.info | [email protected]‬‬
 GRAMMAR
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ اﻟﻠﻐــــــــــﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬

Prepared by: Mulla (2002)

May 2002 (version 0)
Reference: “Grammar For All Levels” By Adnan Naim
 Main Menu ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
„ English Alphabetic ‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ – Past Continuous Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
„ Parts of Speech ‫أﻗﺴﺎم اﻟﻜﻼم‬ – Future Continuous Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
„ Sentences ‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺠُﻤﻞ‬ – Present Perfect Tense ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‬
„ Verb to BE “‫”ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻜﻮن‬ – Past Perfect Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺘﺎم‬
„ Verb to DO “‫”ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ – Future Perfect Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺎم‬
„ Verb to HAVE “‫”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ‬ – Present Perfect Continuous ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
„ Nouns ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ „ Imperatives ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ‬
– Countable Nouns ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬
– Spelling Rules for Plurals ‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬ „ Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬
– Uncountable Nouns ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬ „ Comparing Adjectives ‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
– Definite & Indefinite Articles ‫أدوات اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ و اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬
„ Adverbs ‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻷﺣﻮال‬
„ Pronouns ‫اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬
– Object Pronouns ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬ „ Active & Passive ‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
– Reflexive Pronouns ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ „ Transitive & Intransitive Verbs ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ و‬
– Relative Pronouns ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬...
‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل‬...
„ Making Questions ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
„ Prepositions ‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
„ ‫ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻت‬How
„ some/‫ﺑﻌﺾ‬
some/‫ ﺑﻌﺾ‬any/‫أي‬ „ Question-
Question-Tags ‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻳﻠﺔ‬
„ Making Negative ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬ „ Conditional “if”
if” ”‫ﻟﻮ“ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬
„ TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬ „ Reported Speech ‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
– Present Simple Tense ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
– Past Simple Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬ „ Countries and Nationalities ‫اﻟﺒﻠﺪان و اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺎت‬
– Future Simple Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
– Present Continuous Tense ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
 English Alphabetic
‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬

1. Capital Letters ‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة‬

A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

2. Small Letters ‫اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‬

a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z

z Consonant Letters ‫اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻟﺴﺎآﻨﺔ‬

b c d f g h j k l m n p q r s t v w x y z

z Vowels Letters ‫اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬

a e i o u

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Parts of Speech‬‬
‫أﻗﺴﺎم اﻟﻜﻼم‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫‪Noun‬‬ ‫‪Ahmed, book‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ‬
‫‪Pronoun‬‬ ‫‪ I, he, she, it, etc. ……..‬هﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻢ أو ﻳﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻪ‬

‫‪Verb‬‬ ‫‪ Play, played, will play‬هﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪوث ﺷﻲء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫وﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Adjective‬‬ ‫رﺟﻞ ﻏﻨﻲ ‪ rich man‬هﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ اﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺔ‬ ‫وﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺒﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺼﻔﺔ هﻨﺎ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ اﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮف ﺑﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮف‬
‫‪Adverb‬‬ ‫‪ Ahmed writes quickly.‬هﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ أو‬
‫ﺣﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ وﺿﻮﺣﺎً‬ ‫أﺣﻤﺪ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Parts of Speech‬‬
‫أﻗﺴﺎم اﻟﻜﻼم‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫‪Preposition‬‬ ‫‪ Ahmed goes to school‬هﻮ آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ أو‬
‫ﺣﺮف اﻟﺠﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ أﺧﺮى‬ ‫أﺣﻤﺪ ﻳﺬهﺐ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺪرﺳﺔ‬

‫‪They traveled by plane‬‬

‫هﻢ ﺳﺎﻓﺮوا ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة‬
‫‪Conjunction‬‬ ‫‪ Ali and Ahmad visited us yesterday.‬هﻮ آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ آﻠﻤﺔ و‬
‫ﺣﺮف اﻟﻌﻄﻒ‬ ‫آﻠﻤﺔ أو ﺟﻤﻠﺔ وﺟﻤﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ و أﺣﻤﺪ زاروﻧﺎ أﻣﺲ‬

‫‪Interjection‬‬ ‫‪ Alas! She died.‬هﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ أﺻﻮات أو ﺻﻴﺤﺎت‬

‫ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻒ ! ﻟﻘﺪ ﻣﺎﺗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Parts of Speech‬‬
‫أﻗﺴﺎم اﻟﻜﻼم‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫‪Article‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ﺛﻼث أدوات ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫أداة‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a, an, the‬‬
‫‪ This is a book.‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ a‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﺳﺎآﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫هﺬا آﺘﺎب‪.‬‬

‫‪ This is an apple.‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ an‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬

‫اﻟﺬي ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‪.‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪the‬‬ ‫‪ This is the book I bought yesterday.‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬

‫هﺬا هﻮ اﻟﻜﺘﺎب اﻟﺬي اﺷﺘﺮﻳﺘﻪ أﻣﺲ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬآﺮ أن اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ وأن ﺗﺤﺘﻮي‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺧﻼف اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﺳﻤﻴﺔ أي ﺑﺪون ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪):‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ(‬
‫وﻟﻮ أردﻧﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﺎ ﻧﻘﻮل ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ali doctor.‬‬
‫وهﺬﻩ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪم اﺣﺘﻮاﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ واﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ أن ﻧﻀﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ali is a doctor‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Sentences‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺠُﻤﻞ‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Simple Sentences‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Compound Sentences‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Complex Sentences‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Simple Sentences‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻌﻞ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫)‪1‬‬ ‫‪I saw a boy.‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬ ‫‪The boy was riding a bicycle.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ رﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻠﺔ واﺣﺪة ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪I saw a boy riding a bicycle.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Compound Sentences‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮآﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ وﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫رﺑﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺤﺮف ﻋﻄﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪and/ but /or‬‬

‫‪and:‬‬ ‫واو اﻟﻌﻄﻒ ‪:‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‬

‫‪Ahmed did his homework. Anas helped him.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ رﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻠﺔ واﺣﺪة ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ahmed did his homework and Anas helped him.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Compound Sentences‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ‬
‫‪but:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ‪:‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ أو ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﻀﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Khaled is rich. He is unhappy.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ رﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻠﺔ واﺣﺪة‪:‬‬
‫‪Khaled is rich but he is unhappy.‬‬

‫‪or:‬‬ ‫أو ‪:‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﺎر‬

‫‪We can play football. We can watch TV.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ رﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻠﺔ واﺣﺪة ‪:‬‬
‫‪We can play football or we can watch TV.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Complex Sentences‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ واﺣﺪ و ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ أﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪Main Clause‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ‪ Subordinate Clause‬وهﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ أﻧﻮاع‪:‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Noun Clause‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ أﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Adjectival Clause‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ وﺻﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Adverbial Clause‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Clause & Phrase
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ و ﺷﺒﻪ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬
„ A clause is a combination of words containing a verb and
has a complete meaning.

:‫ ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ هﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ آﻠﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻌﻞ و ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺗﺎم‬

I saw the man who was carrying a stick.

„ A phrase is a combination of words forming part of the

sentence but without a verb.

.‫ﺷﺒﻪ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ آﻠﻤﺎت ﺗﻜﻮن ﺟﺰءاً ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﺪون ﻓﻌﻞ‬
:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
I saw the man carrying a stick.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Verb to BE “‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻜﻮن‬

„ It is used as a principal and a helping verb.

: ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم آﻔﻌﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ وﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

Subject Present Past Past participle
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫أﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل‬

I am was been

He, She, It is was been

We, They, are were been

You

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻜﻮن“ ‪Verb to BE‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺎدات أو ﺣﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺼﻞ واﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻓﻲ‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪:Examples‬‬ ‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪I am a pupil.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪They are boys.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
Negative Sentences with the verb to BE
“‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻜﻮن‬
„ We make negative statements with the verb to BE
by using the word not after the verb to be.
‫ﻧﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ )ﻳﻜﻮن( ﺑﻮﺿﻊ آﻠﻤﺔ‬
. ‫( ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‬not)

Affirmative Negative
‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬
I am at home. I am not at home.
You are tall. You are not tall.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
Making Questions with the verb to BE
“‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻜﻮن‬

„ “Yes” or “No” questions and short answers

:‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ب)ﻧﻌﻢ( و )ﻻ( و اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‬
“Yes” or “No” questions Short Answers
‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔ إﺟﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑـ ﻧﻌﻢ و ﻻ‬ ‫إﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‬
Affirmative Negative
‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬

Be +Subject + Complement Yes + Subject No + Subject +

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ‬ + Be Be + not

Are you a teacher? Yes, I am. No, I am not.

Were the boys at school? Yes, they were. No, they were
not.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻌﻤﻞ“ ‪Verb to DO‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪It is used as a principal and a helping verb.‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم آﻔﻌﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ وﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Subject‬‬ ‫‪Present‬‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫‪Past participle‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫أﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل‬

‫‪I, you, we,‬‬ ‫‪do‬‬ ‫‪did‬‬ ‫‪done‬‬

‫‪they‬‬

‫‪He, She, It‬‬ ‫‪does‬‬ ‫‪did‬‬ ‫‪done‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺎدات أو ﺣﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺼﻞ واﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ“ ‪Verb to HAVE‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪It is used as a principal and a helping verb.‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم آﻔﻌﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ وﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Subject‬‬ ‫‪Present‬‬ ‫‪Past‬‬ ‫‪Past participle‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫أﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل‬

‫‪I, you, we,‬‬ ‫‪have‬‬ ‫‪had‬‬ ‫‪had‬‬

‫‪they‬‬
‫‪He, She, It‬‬ ‫‪has‬‬ ‫‪had‬‬ ‫‪had‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺎدات أو ﺣﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺼﻞ واﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Negative Sentences with verb to HAVE
as a main verb
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ“ آﻔﻌﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬

Subject + + not + have +

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ do/does/did Complement
‫ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ‬

I do not have a car.

He does not have A new watch.

They did not have breakfast this

morning.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Making Questions with the verb to HAVE as a
main verb
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ“ آﻔﻌﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬

“Yes” or “No” questions Short Answers

‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔ إﺟﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑـ ﻧﻌﻢ و ﻻ‬ ‫إﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‬
Affirmative Negative
‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬

Do/Does/Did +Subject +have + Complement Yes + Subject + No + Subject +

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ‬ do/does/did do/does/did
+not
Do you have a car? Yes, I do. No, I do not.

Does he have a new watch? Yes, he does. No, he does not

Did they have Breakfast this Yes, they did. No, they did not.
morning?

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Verb to HAVE as a helping verb‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ “ آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Verb to have is used as a helping verb to form the‬‬

‫‪perfect tense.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻴﻜﻮن زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‪.‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪They have lived here for two years.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Adel has just finished his work.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Negative Sentences with verb to HAVE‬‬
‫‪as a helping verb‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ“ آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﻧﻀﻊ ‪ not‬ﺑﻌﺪ هﺬا اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪I have lived here for a long time.‬‬
‫‪I have not lived here for a long time.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Questions with verb to HAVE as a‬‬
‫‪helping verb‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ“ آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

‫„‬ ‫‪“Yes” or “No” questions and short answers‬‬

‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺑـ ﻧﻌﻢ و ﻻ و اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺳﺆال ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻧﻘﺪم‬
‫هﺬا اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪They have lived here for a long time.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫?‪Have they lived here for a long time‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Yes, they have.‬‬ ‫‪No, they have not.‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Other Uses of Verb to HAVE
“‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ”ﻳﻤﻠﻚ‬
„ To express necessity in the present and past have to, has to,
had to.
:‫ ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﻟﻴﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻀﺮورة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع و اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
I have to leave now.
____________________________________________________
„ With some model auxiliaries.
:‫ ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬
You had better see a doctor.
____________________________________________________
„ To show that something is caused by another person.
:‫ ﻣﺜﺎل‬.‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﻦ أن ﺷﻴﺌﺎً ﻣﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ اﺧﺮ‬
I have my shoes cleaned every week.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Nouns ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
Nouns are words we use to name:
: ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء هﻲ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺬآﺮ‬
.‫ ﺷﻌﻮر‬، ‫ أﻓﻜﺎر‬، ‫ ﻣﻜﺎن‬، ‫ ﺷﻲء‬، ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬، ‫ ﻋﻠﻢ‬، ‫اﺳﻢ‬

‫أﺷﺨﺎص‬ People man, father, teacher, neighbor, …

‫أﺷﻴﺎء‬ Things book, table, sugar, fruit, …
‫أﻣﺎآﻦ‬ Places school, street, city, house, …..
‫أﻓﻜﺎر‬ Ideas freedom, honesty, truth, ….
‫ﺷﻌﻮر‬ Feelings happiness, anger, boredom, joy, ….

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Countable & Uncountable Nouns‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة و ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Countable Nouns: are things that be‬‬

‫‪counted as one, two, three, and so on.‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‪ :‬هﻲ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪهﺎ ﺑـ واﺣﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎن ‪ ،‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ وهﻜﺬا‪.‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪Uncountable Nouns: cannot be counted.‬‬

‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪودة‪ :‬هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪهﺎ أي ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫وﺿﻊ رﻗﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Countable Nouns‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬
‫„‬ ‫‪These nouns have singular and plural forms.‬‬
‫هﺬﻩ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻣﻔﺮدة و ﺟﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Before singular countable nouns you can use a/an.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻔﺮدة اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام )‪. (a/an‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪You cannot use singular countable nouns alone‬‬

‫‪without words such as:‬‬
‫‪a, an, one, my, your, his, etc.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻔﺮدة ﻣﻌﺪودة ﺑﻤﻔﺮدهﺎ ﺑﺪون‬
‫اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Spelling Rules for Plurals
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬
We form plurals of most nouns by adding “s”
to the singular noun.
‫ﻧﻜﻮّن اﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
.‫“ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻔﺮد‬s”

Singular Plural
one book two books
one horse many horses
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Spelling Rules for Plurals‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬

‫ﺣـــــــــﺎﻻت ﺧﺎﺻــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮوف ‪ sh, ch, z, x, s‬ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪es‬‬

‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪match‬‬ ‫‪matches‬‬
‫‪bus‬‬ ‫‪buses‬‬
‫‪dish‬‬ ‫‪dishes‬‬
‫‪box‬‬ ‫‪boxes‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Spelling Rules for Plurals‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺣـــــــــﺎﻻت ﺧﺎﺻــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪ y‬وﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪ies‬‬ ‫وﺳﺒﻘﻪ ﺣﺮف ﺳﺎآﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺬف‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪y‬‬
‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪city‬‬ ‫‪cities‬‬
‫‪baby‬‬ ‫‪babies‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫وﺳﺒﻘﻪ ﺣﺮف ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‪ ،‬ﻧﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪y‬‬

‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪boy‬‬ ‫‪boys‬‬
‫‪key‬‬ ‫‪keys‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Spelling Rules for Plurals‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺣـــــــــﺎﻻت ﺧﺎﺻــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪es‬‬ ‫وﺳﺒﻘﻪ ﺣﺮف ﺳﺎآﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮف‬

‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪potato‬‬ ‫‪potatoes‬‬
‫‪tomato‬‬ ‫‪tomatoes‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ o‬وﺳﺒﻘﻪ ﺣﺮف ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‪ ،‬ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪s‬‬
‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪radio‬‬ ‫‪radios‬‬
‫‪zoo‬‬ ‫‪zoos‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Spelling Rules for Plurals‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺣـــــــــﺎﻻت ﺧﺎﺻــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪es‬‬ ‫وﻧﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ f‬أو ‪ fe‬ﻧﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺮف ‪v‬‬
‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪knife‬‬ ‫‪knives‬‬
‫‪shelf‬‬ ‫‪shelves‬‬

‫‪:‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪classroom‬‬ ‫‪classrooms‬‬
‫‪policeman‬‬ ‫‪policemen‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Spelling Rules for Plurals‬‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ إﻣﻼء اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺣـــــــــﺎﻻت ﺧﺎﺻــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫هﻨﺎك ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺸﺎذة‪:‬‬
‫‪Singular‬‬ ‫‪Plural‬‬
‫‪man‬‬ ‫‪men‬‬
‫‪woman‬‬ ‫‪women‬‬
‫‪child‬‬ ‫‪children‬‬
‫‪person‬‬ ‫‪people‬‬
‫‪foot‬‬ ‫‪feet‬‬
‫‪tooth‬‬ ‫‪teeth‬‬
‫‪goose‬‬ ‫‪geese‬‬
‫‪mouse‬‬ ‫‪mice‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Uncountable Nouns‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Uncountable nouns cannot be counted.‬‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪es , s‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪salt, coffee, tea, food, meat, gold, music, blood.‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪an‬‬ ‫أو‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪a‬‬

‫اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Uncountable Nouns‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬

‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪاً ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬

‫‪flour‬‬ ‫‪ salt‬دﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ meat‬ﻣﻠﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻢ‬
‫‪information‬‬ ‫‪ coffee‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ knowledge‬ﻗﻬﻮة‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫‪butter‬‬ ‫‪ food‬زﺑﺪ‬ ‫‪ tea‬ﻃﻌﺎم‬ ‫ﺷﺎي‬
‫‪sugar‬‬ ‫‪ gold‬ﺳﻜﺮ‬ ‫‪ blood‬ذهﺐ‬ ‫دم‬
‫‪news‬‬ ‫‪ glass‬أﺧﺒﺎر‬ ‫‪ cheese‬زﺟﺎج‬ ‫ﺟﺒﻦ‬
‫‪milk‬‬ ‫‪ paper‬ﺣﻠﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ bread‬ورق‬ ‫ﺧﺒﺰ‬
‫‪rice‬‬ ‫‪ wood‬رز‬ ‫‪ furniture‬ﺧﺸﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮوﺷﺎت‬
‫‪rain‬‬ ‫‪ steel‬ﻣﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪ grass‬ﺣﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺐ‬
‫‪cloth‬‬ ‫‪ music‬ﻗﻤﺎش‬ ‫‪ marble‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫رﺧﺎم‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Uncountable Nouns‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺮد‪.‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Coffee is a traditional drink in Saudi Arabia.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Milk has many minerals.‬‬

‫و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻮ وﺿﻌﺖ آﻠﻤﺎت ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪود ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Two cups of tea are not enough for me.‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Five liters of oil do not operate this machine.‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Definite & Indefinite Articles
‫أدوات اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ و اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬
a/an
are used as indefinite articles. .‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎن آﺄدوات ﻧﻜﺮة‬

The
is used as definite articles. .‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم آﺄداة ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬

„ We put “a” before a noun starting with a constant sound.

.‫ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﺳﺎآﻦ‬a ‫ﻧﻀﻊ‬

„ We put “an” before a noun starting with a vowel sound.

.‫ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‬an ‫ﻧﻀﻊ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫”‪Indefinite Articles “a” & “an‬‬
‫أدوات اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬
‫„‬ ‫‪We put “a” before a noun starting with a constant‬‬
‫‪sound.‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ ‪ a‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﺳﺎآﻦ‪.‬‬

‫„‬ ‫‪We put “an” before a noun starting with a vowel‬‬

‫‪sound.‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ ‪ an‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺤﺮف ﻣﺘﺤﺮك‪.‬‬

‫‪ Vowels‬اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫‪a–e–i–o-u‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
Indefinite Articles “a” & “an”
‫أدوات اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬

We use a/an:
Before a singular ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻔﺮدة‬a table
countable noun. .‫ اﻟﻤﻌﺪودة‬an egg
Before a job, a ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ أو‬Saleh is a doctor
particular group of ‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬He is an engineer.
people or a nationality. .‫ اﻟﻨﺎس أو اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺔ‬She is an English
women.
With numbers that ‫ ﻣﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ‬He washes his
mean every. “‫ ”آﻞ‬hands ten times a
day. (means every
day).

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
Indefinite Articles “a” & “an”
‫أدوات اﻟﻨﻜﺮة‬

We DO NOT use a/an:

No article is used with ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي أداة ﻣﻊ‬Love, beauty,
abstract nouns and the ‫ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ و‬hatred, wood,
.‫أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﺎدن‬
names of metals. silver, gold

No article is used ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي أداة‬There are books on

before plural or ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻤﻊ أو اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬the table.
uncountable nouns.
.‫ اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪودة‬Milk is good for you.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 The Definite Article “The”
“‫أدوات اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ”أل‬
The is used before: :‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ”أل“ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

A noun that is the only ‫ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻦ‬The river Nile
one of its kind. .‫ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻮى واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬The Ka’aba

Names of rivers, seas, ‫ أﺳﻤﺎء اﻷﻧﻬﺎر و‬The Arabian Gulf

oceans, etc…. .‫اﻟﺦ‬........‫ اﻟﺒﺤﺎر‬The Red Sea
A noun which is the ‫ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬Umar answered the
object of a sentence. .‫ ﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬question.

The names of musical .‫ أﺳﻤﺎء اﻵﻻت اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬Can you play the duff?
instruments.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 The Definite Article “The”
“‫أدوات اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ”أل‬
The is used before: :‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ”أل“ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

Names of some .‫ أﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان‬The United Kingdom

countries. The U.S.A.

With some time ‫ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬at the weekend

expressions. .‫ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬in the evening
With dates. .‫ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻮارﻳﺦ‬On the first day of every
month.

With some general .‫ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮات اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬Listen to the radio/news.

expressions. Go to the market/desert.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 The Definite Article “The”
“‫أدوات اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ”أل‬

Use article with the name ‫ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ أل‬I saw a man. The man
that is repeated. ‫ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ذآﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺮة‬was young.
.‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
No article is used with the ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي أداة ﻣﻊ‬I do not like science. My
names of studies of .‫ أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﺪراﺳﻴﺔ‬favorite subject is
subjects. mathematics.
No article is used before ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي أداة ﻗﺒﻞ‬I am going to school.
such words as school, ،‫ أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺪرﺳﺔ‬I always go to bed early.
home, bed, work, etc. ....‫ ﻋﻤﻞ‬،‫ ﺳﺮﻳﺮ‬،‫ﻣﻨﺰل‬
No article is used before ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أي أداة ﻣﻊ‬on Monday, in June
such words such as day ‫ أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻷﻳﺎم و‬in summer (sometimes
and month names. . ‫ اﻟﺸﻬﻮر‬in the summer).
before breakfast.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Pronouns ‫اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬
A pronoun replaces a noun . ‫اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ‬
Subject Object Possessive Possessive Reflexive
Pronouns Pronouns Adjectives Pronouns Pronouns
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎس‬

I me my mine myself
you you your yours yourself
he him his his himself
she her her hers herself
it it its its itself
We us our ours ourselves
you you your yours yourselves
they them their theirs themselves

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Pronouns‬‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫•‬ ‫‪We use a pronouns instead of a noun when it is clear who or‬‬
‫‪what we are talking about .‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﻜﻮن ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻦ أو ﻋﻦ أي‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﻧﺘﺤﺪث‪.‬‬

‫‪Examples‬‬ ‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬
‫‪Ali is a good student. He passes all his tests.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Object Pronouns
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬
„ We use an object pronoun . ‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻤﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬

– After a preposition. ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

Do you live near them?
Send the box directly to me.

– After to and for with verbs like make, give, send, lend,
pass, take, show.
The little boy made it for her.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reflexive Pronouns
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

„ Reflexive pronouns are used: .‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮاﻹﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

– for emphasize ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﻴﺪ‬

Did you do the decorations yourself ?

I did the painting myself.

– With some special expressions ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬

Help yourself .
Enjoy yourself.
Behave yourself.
I live by myself. (I live alone)

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫•‬ ‫‪The relative pronouns are used to join sentences together.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬

‫و ﻟﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ آﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻧﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺈذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻼً ﻋﺎﻗﻼً ﻧﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪who‬‬
‫وإذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻗﻼً ﻧﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ whom‬و ﻧﻌﺮف ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫و إذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪. which‬‬
‫أﻣﺎ ‪ that‬ﻓﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺪل أي آﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ إﻻ أﻧﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫و إذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪. whose‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬اﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪Who‬‬
‫‪Who‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ[‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ] ]ﻟﻠﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﺎﻋﻞاﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ[‬ ‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ who‬ﻟﺘﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ و ﻃﺒﻌﺎً ﻧﻌﺮف اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ أول اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Here is the man. The man is a doctor.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﺬف آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ The man‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ و ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ who‬ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪Here is the man who is a doctor.‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1) The man came here. The man was a doctor.‬‬
‫‪The man who was here is a doctor‬‬
‫‪2) My friend swims well. He lives here.‬‬
‫‪My friend who lives here swims well.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪Whom‬‬
‫‪Whom‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ[‬
‫ﺑﻪاﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ[‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ] ]اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮلﺑﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ whom‬ﻟﺘﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ و ﻃﺒﻌﺎً ﻧﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪The man came here. I visited him.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﺬف آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ him‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ ‪ whom‬أول اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻧﻀﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮل و اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ )اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﻮد إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ( ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪The man whom I visited came here.‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1) The man was working with me. I paid him.‬‬
‫‪The man whom I paid was working with me.‬‬
‫‪2) This is the girl. You gave her a flower.‬‬
‫‪This is the girl whom you gave a flower.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪Which‬‬
‫‪Which‬‬ ‫]ﻟﻠﺠﻤﺎد اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ[‬
‫]ﻟﻠﺠﻤﺎد اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ[‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ which‬ﻟﺘﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻗﻞ و ﻃﺒﻌﺎً ﻧﻌﺮف اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ أول‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ أﻣﺎ اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪He found his book. He lost it yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻧﺮى أن آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ him‬ﺗﻌﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ his book‬ﻓﻨﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ و ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ which‬ﻓﻲ أول‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮل و اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫)اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﻮد إﻟﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ( ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪He found his book which he lost yesterday.‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1) This is the house. I live in it.‬‬
‫‪This is the house which I live in.‬‬
‫‪2) This book is cheap. It is very useful.‬‬
‫‪This book which is very useful is cheap.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪That‬‬
‫‪That‬‬ ‫]ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻗﻞ و ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ[‬
‫]ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻗﻞ و ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ[‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ that‬ﻟﺘﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أو اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ و‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻗﻞ أي ﺗﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ أي أداة ﺳﺒﻖ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪This is the boy. You met her.‬‬

‫‪This is the boy that (whom) you met.‬‬

‫‪I have a bird. It sings.‬‬

‫‪I have a bird that (which) sings.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Relative Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪Whose‬‬
‫‪Whose‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ] ]ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ[‬ ‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺬي‪،‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ‪ whose‬ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪This is the man. His car hit the boy.‬‬

‫‪This is the man whose his car hit the boy.‬‬

‫هﻨﺎ ﻧﺠﺪ أن آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ car‬ﻣﻤﻠﻮآﺔ ﻟـ ‪ the man‬ﻓﻨﺤﺬف ﺿﻤﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ و‬

‫ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻨﻪ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮل ‪ whose‬ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﻌﺪهﺎ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪. car‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Making Questions
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺳﺆال ﻧﻀﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
:‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬
:‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة هﻲ‬Helping Verbs
„ am – is – are – was – were – have – has – had –
will – would – shall – should – can – could – may –
might – must – ought to

:‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــﺔ‬
„ They are doctors. Are they doctors?
„ She can help us? Can they help us?
„ I will go to the market? Will you go to the market?

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Questions‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع ﺑﺪون ‪ s‬ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪do‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪They play tennis.‬‬ ‫?‪Do they play tennis‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪I write books.‬‬ ‫?‪Do you write books‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ )اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول( و ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

‫‪: does‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺬي ﺑﻪ ‪ s‬ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪ِAhmed‬‬
‫‪Ahmed plays tennis.‬‬ ‫?‪Does Ahmed play tennis‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪Huda watch TV.‬‬ ‫?‪Does Huda watch TV‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ )اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول( و ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Questions‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪did‬‬ ‫‪ (٣‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــﺔ‪:‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪They watched TV last night.‬‬
‫?‪Did they watch TV last night‬‬
‫„‬ ‫‪I played football yesterday.‬‬
‫?‪Did you play football yesterday‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ )اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول( و ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈــــــــﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮن إﺟﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪ Yes‬أو ‪ No‬و ذﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺄداة‬
‫ﺳﺆال‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Questions‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫إذا آﺎن اﻟﻬﺪف ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال إﻋﻄﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺑﺈﺣﺪى أدوات اﻟﺴﺆال اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪Wh Questions‬‬
‫?‪Where‬‬ ‫أﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

‫?‪When‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﺎن‬

‫?‪Why‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎذا‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫?‪What‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ /‬ﻣﺎذا‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء‬

‫?‪Which‬‬ ‫أي‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ‬

‫?‪Who‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﺎﻗﻞ‬

‫?‪Whom‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻗﻞ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Questions‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫)‪Wh Questions (Cont.‬‬
‫?‪Whose‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫?‪How‬‬ ‫آﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫?‪How many‬‬ ‫آﻢ ﻋﺪد‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﺪد‬

‫?‪How much‬‬ ‫آﻢ آﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬

‫?‪How long‬‬ ‫آﻢ ﻃﻮل‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻄﻮل‬

‫?‪How old‬‬ ‫آﻢ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﺮ‬

‫?‪How far‬‬ ‫آﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Steps for Making a Question‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮات ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫‪ (١‬اﺧﺘﺮ أداة اﻟﺴﺆال اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺴﺆال ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪When, Where, Why………..etc‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪) helping verb‬إن وﺟﺪ( ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ أي ﺑﻌﺪ أداة‬
‫اﻟﺴﺆال ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم‪:‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع ﺑﺪون ‪ s‬ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪do‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺬي ﺑﻪ ‪ s‬ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪does‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪did‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺳﻮاء اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ أﺻﻼً أو‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎهﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫أي ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻔﻪ اﻷول‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬اﺣﺬف اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺴﺆال ﻋﻨﻪ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺟﻮاب اﻟﺴﺆال‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Steps for Making a Question‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮات ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال‬

‫‪:‬‬ ‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪They are going to eat meat.‬‬
‫?‪What are they going to eat‬‬
‫* ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻨﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﻨﺎ ‪ are‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ they‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ هﻲ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪meat‬‬
‫ﻷﻧﻬﺎ اﻟﺠﻮاب ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺆال‪.‬‬

‫‪They played tennis at school.‬‬

‫?‪Where did they play tennis‬‬
‫* ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻨﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ‪ did‬ﻟﻌﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ و ﻷن اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪ .‬و‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ أﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﺬف ‪ ed‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻹﻋﺎدﺗﻪ أﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ‪ .‬و ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻨﺎ ﺣﺬﻓﻨﺎ ‪at school‬‬
‫ﻷﻧﻬﺎ اﻟﺠﻮاب ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺆال‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Steps for Making a Question‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮات ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ you‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪I‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪you‬‬
‫‪ my‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪your‬‬ ‫‪ we‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪you‬‬

‫إذا آﺎن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻻ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻌﻼً ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪاً ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻧﺎ ﺑﻞ ﻧﻀﻊ أداة اﻟﺴﺆال ‪ who‬إذا آﺎن اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﺎﻗﻼً و‬
‫‪ what‬إذا آﺎن اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻗﻼً‪.‬‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ahmed broke the window.‬‬ ‫?‪Who broke the window‬‬
‫‪The book describes accidents.‬‬ ‫?‪What describes accidents‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻت‬
How

He was very pleased to meet his friend. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How

How was he to meet his friend? ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ أو‬
‫اﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
Thirty boys are in this class. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How many boys are in this class? ‫اﻟﻌﺪد‬ many
I am twenty years old. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How old are you? ‫اﻟﻌﻤﺮ‬ old
You paid five pounds for this coat. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How much did you pay for this coat? ‫اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬ much

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻت‬
How

It is 450 KM from Dammam to Riyadh. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How

How far is it from Dammam to Riyadh? ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت‬ far
This rope is two meters long. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How long is this rope? ‫اﻷﻃﻮال‬ long
This fence is four meters high. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How high is this fence? ‫اﻹرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت‬ high
Sami is meter and a half tall. ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺆال ﻋﻦ‬ How
How tall is Sami? ‫أﻃﻮال‬ tall
‫اﻷﺷﺨﺎص‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 some/‫ﺑﻌﺾ‬
any/‫أي‬
.‫و أﺧﻮاﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺴﺆال‬ some ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬

1) We had some books. 2) Somebody was there.

3) He is somewhere.

.‫و أﺧﻮاﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﺆال و اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬ any ‫وﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬

:‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﺆال‬
1) Do you have any books? 2) Is anybody at home?
3) Is he anywhere?

:‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
1) We do not have any books. 2) I did not see anybody.
3) He is not anywhere.

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Making Negative
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬not
not ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﻲ ﻧﻀﻊ آﻠﻤﺔ‬
:‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬

:‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة هﻲ‬Helping Verbs

am – is – are – was – were – have – has – had – will
– would – shall – should – can – could – may –
might – must – ought to

:‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــﺔ‬
„ They are happy. They are not happy?
„ He can help us? He can not help us?

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Making Negative
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
Long forms & Short forms of Verb to be
(Affirmative) ‫ﻓﻲ اﻹﺛﺒﺎت‬ (Negative) ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
Long Forms Short Forms Long Forms Short Forms
I am I’m I am not I’m not
He is He’s He is not He’s not
She is She’s She is not She’s not
It is It’s It is not It’s not
You are You’re You are not You’re not
We are We’re We are not We’re not
They are They’re They are not They’re not

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Making Negative‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻨﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(not‬‬
‫‪ (do,‬ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ )‪(not‬‬
‫‪(do,does,‬‬
‫)‪does,did‬‬
‫وهﺬﻩ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة هﻲ‪did) :‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺻﻠﻪ أي اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬إذا آﺎﻧﺖ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻨﻨﻔﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﻲ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪Affirmative‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫‪Negative‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫‪no, any‬‬
‫‪both……and‬‬ ‫آﻞ ﻣﻦ‪....‬و‬ ‫‪neither………….nor‬‬
‫‪either…..or‬‬ ‫إﻣﺎ‪......‬أو‬ ‫‪neither………….nor‬‬
‫‪sometimes‬‬ ‫أﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ‬ ‫‪never‬‬
‫‪as………as‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪ‪.......‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪not so…………..as‬‬
‫‪all‬‬ ‫آﻞ‬ ‫‪not all‬‬
‫‪every‬‬ ‫آﻞ‬ ‫‪no, not every‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪1. Present Simple Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﺎدات و اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ و اﻟﻘﺪرات و اﻟﺤﻘﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ أي اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺠﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪every‬‬ ‫آﻞ‬ ‫داﺋﻤﺎً ‪always‬‬ ‫‪usually‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدة‬

‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣًﺎ ‪generally‬‬ ‫‪often‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ‪sometimes‬‬

‫ﻧﺎدرا ‪rarely‬‬ ‫‪never‬‬ ‫أﺑﺪًا‬ ‫‪from time to time‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

1. 1.
Present
PresentSimple
Simple Tense
Tense ‫اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
1. I go to school everyday.
2. They usually sleep at 11.00 p.m.
3. We often drink coffee in the morning.
4. She is never late to school.
.‫ زﻳﺎدة ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‬s ‫ إذا آﺎن اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻔﺮد ﻏﺎﺋﺐ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ‬:‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
1. Ali drinks milk every morning.
2. A cow gives us milk.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫‪Past Simple Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫‪2. Past Simple Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث وﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ أي إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ed‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﺸﺎذة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪yesterday‬‬ ‫أﻣﺲ‬ ‫‪last‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ago‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻰ‬

‫‪in 1988 AD, in 1415 AH:‬‬ ‫أو أي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

2. Past Simple Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

I, He, She, it was

They, We, You were

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

1. I watched television last night.

2. They visited their uncle yesterday.
3. We went to Makkah two months often.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪3. Future‬‬
‫‪3. Future‬‬
‫‪Simple‬‬
‫‪Simple‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪوﺛﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ will‬او ‪ shall‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ‪ shall‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺘﻜﻠﻢ ‪ I‬و ‪ we‬أﻣﺎ ‪ will‬ﻓﺘﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‪.‬‬
‫وﻟﻜﻦ ‪ shall‬ﻧﺪر اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ وﻗﺪ ﺣﻠﺖ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ will‬ﺑﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫ﻏﺪًا‬ ‫‪next‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎدم‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪in the future‬‬

‫‪in 2010 AD, in 1425 AH:‬‬ ‫أو أي ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪3. Future Simple Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪I will go to school tomorrow.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪They will play foot ball next Friday.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪He will join the army in the future.‬‬
‫هﻨﺎك ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ أﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪:‬‬
‫‪am , is , are‬‬ ‫‪going to‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Tense‬‬

‫‪4.Present‬‬
‫‪PresentContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث ﻳﻘﻊ اﻵن ﻓﻘﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ + ing‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪am / is / are +‬‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪am + verb + ing‬‬
‫‪He, she, it‬‬ ‫‪is + verb + ing‬‬
‫‪They, we, you‬‬ ‫‪are + verb + ing‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪now‬‬ ‫اﻵن‬ ‫‪at the moment‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪look‬‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫‪listen‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻤﻊ‬ ‫‪at the present time‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﺿﺮ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪4.‬‬
‫‪4.Present‬‬
‫‪PresentContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪I am reading a story at the moment.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪They are watching television now.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Look! the bus is coming.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪4.‬‬
‫‪4.Present‬‬
‫‪PresentContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﺳﻮاء اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ أو اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ وهﺬﻩ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺸﻌﻮر واﻷذى واﻹﺣﺴﺎس وﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل ‪:‬‬
‫‪like‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺐ‬ ‫‪love‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺐ‬ ‫‪want‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪prefer‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ‬

‫‪wish‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫‪hate‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪dislike‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪feel‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻌﺮ‬

‫‪hope‬‬ ‫ﻳﺄﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪hear‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫‪think‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ‬ ‫‪seem‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪو‬

‫‪appear‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪fear‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺸﻰ‬ ‫‪consider‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪fit‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫‪believe‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪق‬ ‫‪trust‬‬ ‫ﻳﺜﻖ‬ ‫‪understand‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻬﻢ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪٥.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Tense‬‬

‫‪٥.Past‬‬
‫‪PastContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ وﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء وﻗﻮع ﻓﻌﻞ أﺧﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ + ing :‬ﻓﻌﻞ‪was / were +‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪when‬‬ ‫‪ while‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ أن‬ ‫‪because‬‬ ‫ﻷن‬

‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪:‬‬
‫هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻪ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ و اﻟﺬي ﺗﺨﻠﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ أي اﻟﺬي وﻗﻊ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺪوﺛﻪ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪5.‬‬
‫‪5.Past‬‬
‫‪PastContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪While I was sleeping , a thief entered my room.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫)ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﻨﺖ ﻧﺎﺋﻤﺎً ‪ ،‬دﺧﻞ ﻟﺺ ﻏﺮﻓﺘﻲ( هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺛﻴﻦ‬
‫أﺣﺪهﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ وهﻮ اﻟﻨﻮم واﻵﺧﺮ دﺧﻮل اﻟﻠﺺ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺬي‬
‫ﺣﺼﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻮم ‪.‬‬
‫‪When we were eating , my father came .‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫) ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﻨﺎ ﻧﺄآﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎء واﻟﺪي( هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺛﻴﻦ أﺣﺪهﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ وهﻮ اﻷآﻞ واﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺠﻲء واﻟﺪي اﻟﺬي ﺣﺼﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻷآﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪5.‬‬
‫‪5.Past‬‬
‫‪PastContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ وﺿﻊ أداة اﻟﺮﺑﻂ وﺳﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ دون أن ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﺎن اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪A thief entered my room while I was sleeping .‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫دﺧﻞ ﻟﺺ ﻏﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﻨﺖ ﻧﺎﺋﻤًﺎ‬

‫‪My father came when we were eating .‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎء واﻟﺪي ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﻨﺎ ﻧﺄآﻞ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪5.‬‬
‫‪5.Past‬‬
‫‪PastContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺐ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ إذا ﺑﺪأت اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ while‬وﺗﺤﺬف‬
‫إذا وﻗﻌﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬآﺮ داﺋﻤﺎً أن ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ‪ while‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻼن اﻷول ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ و اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ وهﻮ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪6.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Tense‬‬

‫‪6.Future‬‬
‫‪FutureContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪوﺛﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ وﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪ + ing‬ﻓﻌﻞ‪( will + be +‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪at‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﺰﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪by‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻠﻮل‬ ‫‪in‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮن‬

‫‪from…to‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‪..‬إﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪all‬‬ ‫‪ after‬آﻞ ‪،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪6.‬‬
‫‪6.Future‬‬
‫‪FutureContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞاﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪By 7.30 tomorrow, I will be flying to Cairo.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪They will be waiting for you at 5 o'clock .‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪7.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‪Tense‬‬

‫‪7.Present‬‬
‫‪PresentPerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث ﺣﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ و اﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﺤﻈﺎت أو‬
‫اﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ و ﻻزاﻟﺖ ﺁﺛﺎرﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‪has / have +‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ‪I :‬‬

‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪since‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫‪for‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪة‬ ‫‪just‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻮ‬

‫‪yet‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‬ ‫‪ever‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻷﺑﺪ‬ ‫‪never‬‬ ‫أﺑﺪًا‬

‫‪recently‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ‬ ‫‪already‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

7.
7.Present
PresentPerfect
PerfectTense
Tense ‫اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

1. I have lived in Riyadh for six years.

2. I have not visited him since 1995.
3. Ahmed has already finished his homework.
4. She has written three letters just now.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

Since
Since&&For
For
• Since means “from some definite point or period n the past up to now”
.‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ آﻠﻤﺔ ”ﻣﻨﺬ“ اﻋﺘﺒﺎراً ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أو ﻓﺘﺮة ﻣﺤﺪدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ و ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‬

• For means “a definite period of time”

.‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ آﻠﻤﺔ ”ﻟﻤﺪة“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮة زﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
since ‫ﻣﻨﺬ‬ For ‫ﻟﻤﺪة‬

2 o’
o’clock a moment
Monday 3 minutes
yesterday an hour
last night many hours
last week/ last month/ last year 3 days/ 5 weeks / 4 months
1996 a year
last century 10 years
he came…………
came………… a century

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪8.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Tense‬‬

‫‪8.Past‬‬
‫‪PastPerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث ﺣﺼﻞ و اﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ زﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‪had +‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ‪I :‬‬

‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪after‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫‪before‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪة‬

‫‪which‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻷﺑﺪ ‪ as soon as‬ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪8.‬‬
‫‪8.Past‬‬
‫‪PastPerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪I had washed before I prayed.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪They went home after they had finished their work.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Ahmed had eaten the cake which he bought.‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪As soon as they had bought a car, they drove to Makkah.‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻪ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺣﺪث‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺘﺎم‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪9.‬‬ ‫‪4. Present Continuous‬‬ ‫‪Tense‬‬

‫‪9.Future‬‬
‫‪FuturePerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪوﺛﻪ و اﻧﺘﻬﺎؤﻩ ﻓﻲ زﻣﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ‪ I :‬اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‪will + have +‬‬

‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪by‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻠﻮل‬ ‫‪at‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪9.‬‬
‫‪9.Future‬‬
‫‪FuturePerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectTense‬‬
‫‪Tense‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪By 2.00 this afternoon, I will have finished my‬‬

‫‪work.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪At 10.00 tonight, she will have written five letters.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪4. Present‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪Continuous Tense‬‬

‫‪١٠.Present‬‬
‫‪١٠.‬‬ ‫‪PresentPerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪث وﻗﻊ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ و ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ و ﻟﻜﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ اﻵن‪.‬‬
‫‪+ ing‬ﻓﻌﻞ‪has / have + been +‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ‪I :‬‬

‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﻊ آﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪for‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪة‬ ‫‪since‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪TENSES‬‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

‫‪١٠.Present‬‬
‫‪١٠.‬‬ ‫‪PresentPerfect‬‬
‫‪PerfectContinuous‬‬
‫‪ContinuousTense‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪Tense‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎماﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪I have been studying English for six years.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪She has been sleeping since 2 o’clock.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 TENSES ‫اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ‬

١٠.Present
١٠. PresentPerfect
PerfectContinuous
ContinuousTense
Tense ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎماﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرعاﻟﺘﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬

: Present Perfect ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ و اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‬
:‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

• Maha started making cakes three hours ago. There are now
one hundred cakes on the table.
:‫ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻮّن‬
Present Perfect Continuous Tense ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬

• She has been making cakes for three hours.

Present Perfect Tense ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‬

• She has made 100 cakes.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Imperatives ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ‬

• Imperatives are verbs used at the beginning of sentences

either in the affirmative or negative to indicate instructions,
invitations, signs and notices or telling someone what to do.
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ هﻲ أﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ أﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ اﻹﺛﺒﺎت‬
‫ اﻹﺷﺎرات و اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت أو إﺧﺒﺎر ﺷﺨﺺ‬،‫ اﻟﺪﻋﻮى‬،‫ﻟﺘﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
.‫ﻣﺎذا ﻳﻔﻌﻞ‬

• The Imperatives uses the simple form of the verb such as:
walk, read, open,….etc.
.‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ أي اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Imperatives ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
Give Instructions ‫إﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
• Mix the flour and the sugar. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬
• Take two tablets every four hours. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬

Make Invitations ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺪﻋﻮى‬

• Come in; make yourselves at home. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬
• Please start; do not wait for me. (Negative ‫)ﻧﻔﻲ‬

Tell someone what to do ‫إﺧﺒﺎر ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﻔﻌﻠﻪ‬

• Open your book. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬
• Do not forget to post the letter. (Negative ‫)ﻧﻔﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Imperatives ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ‬

‫أﻣﺜﻠــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
Give Warnings ‫إﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮات‬
• Keep out. Danger. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬

Make Signs & Notices ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ إﺷﺎرات و ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬

• Push. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬
• Insert 2 X 50 SR. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬
• Keep off the grass. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬

Make Requests ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬

• Please open the door. (Affirmative ‫)إﺛﺒﺎت‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬

„ A modal has only one form of the verb for all persons, but it can
have several meanings and time frames, depending on the
context in which it is used.
‫اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺷﺨﺎص وﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻪ ﻋﺪة ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ و‬
.‫أﺷﻜﺎل زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى اﻟﺬي ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻴﻪ‬

„ Form ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
shall, should, will would, may, might, can, could, must, ought to +
(‫)اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻷول ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ‬

„ Modals have no infinitives or past participles.

.‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺼﺪر أو ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬
Modals Expresses: Example
‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬ :‫ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

shall
Promise You shall take a reward.
‫وﻋﺪ‬
Determination He does not want to obey me: but he
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ shall.
shall.

Threat You shall be punished if you come late.

‫ﺗﻬﺪﻳﺪ‬

should
Duty You should obey your teachers.
‫اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ‬
Advice or opinion You should stop smoking.
‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ أو اﻟﺮأي‬

will
The simple future tense. He will visit us tomorrow.
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
Determination or promise I will travel when I like.
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ أو اﻟﻮﻋﺪ‬ We will do as you wish.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬
Modals Expresses: Example
‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬ :‫ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

might Possibility
‫اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
I hoped that I might succeed.
I thought that the weather might
might change

can, am/is/are Ability He can do it carefully.

‫اﻟﻤﻘﺪرة‬ He is able to solve the problem.
able to
shall be able, Ability in the future I shall be able to help you.
‫اﻟﻤﻘﺪرة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
will be able

could Past, present or future possibility

‫ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬/ ‫ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬/‫اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
Fahad could drive his car a year ago.
Ali is not in class today. He could be sick.
Do not leave now. It could rain now.

must Necessity
‫اﻟﻀﺮورة‬
You must listen to your teachers.

had to The past form of must :past necessity

‫اﻟﻀﺮورة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
Faisal could not come to our dinner party.
He had to stay home to study.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬
Modals Expresses: Example
‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬ :‫ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

ought to Advice
‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ‬
You ought to help the poor.

ought to Actions that were advisable in the past

‫أﺣﺪاث آﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
You ought to have studied.
(You did not. That was a mistake)
have ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬

Affirmative Negative Question Short Answers

‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬ ‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫إﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‬
Affirmative Negative
They should eat They should not Should they eat Yes, they should.
should. No, they should not.
not.
now. eat now. now?

He will leave. He will not leave. Will he leave? Yes, he will.

will. No, he will not.
not.

He would He would not Would he leave? Yes, he would.

would. No, he would not.
not.
succeed. succeed.

I might succeed. I might not Might I succeed?

succeed.

I may sleep. I may not sleep. May I sleep?

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Modals ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ‬

Affirmative Negative Question Short Answers

‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻲ‬ ‫إﺛﺒﺎت‬ ‫إﺟﺎﺑﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة‬
Affirmative Negative
I can do it. I can not do it. Can I do it? Yes, you can.
can. No, you can not.
not.

He could talk. He could not Could he talk? Yes, he could.

could. No, he could not.
not.
talk.

We could have a We could not Could we have a Yes, you could.

could. No, he could not.
not.
test tomorrow. have a test test tomorrow?
tomorrow.
You must go now. You must not go Must you go now? Yes, I must.
must. No, I must not.
not.
now.

You ought to help You ought not to Ought you to help Yes, I ought to.
to. No, I ought not.
not.
them. help them. them?

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Comparing Adjectives‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪4. PresentAdjectives‬‬

‫‪Continuous Tense‬‬
‫‪1.Comparing‬‬
‫‪ComparingShort‬‬
‫‪Short Adjectives‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺎتاﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔاﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ أو ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ er‬ﻷﻏﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة ﺛﻢ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪than‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Ali is older than Ahmed.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪My Car is faster than yours.‬‬

‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا اﻧﺘﻬﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ e‬ﻓﺄﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪r‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪safe‬‬ ‫‪safer than‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪simpler than‬‬

‫آﺎﻟﻌﺎدة‪.‬‬ ‫إذا اﻧﺘﻬﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ y‬ﻓﺄﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﺐ ال ‪ y‬إﻟﻰ ‪ i‬ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪er‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪easy‬‬ ‫‪easier than‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪heavy‬‬ ‫‪heavier than‬‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Comparing Adjectives‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪4. PresentAdjectives‬‬

‫‪Continuous Tense‬‬
‫‪1.Comparing‬‬
‫‪ComparingShort‬‬
‫‪Short Adjectives‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺎتاﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔاﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ أو ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ و ﻳﻼﺣﻆ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ est‬هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻼﺣﻆ هﻨﺎ أهﻤﻴﺔ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪the‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Everest is the highest mountain.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪This is the biggest building in Riyadh.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫إذا اﻧﺘﻬﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ e‬ﻓﺄﻧﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪e‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪safe‬‬ ‫‪the safest‬‬

‫آﺎﻟﻌﺎدة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ‪est‬‬ ‫إﻟﻰ‬ ‫إذا اﻧﺘﻬﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺮف ‪ y‬ﻓﺄﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﺐ ال ‪y‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪easy‬‬ ‫‪the easiest‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Comparing Adjectives‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬

‫‪2.‬‬
‫‪2.Comparing‬‬
‫‪ComparingLong‬‬
‫‪LongAdjectives‬‬
‫‪Adjectives‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺎتاﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔاﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬

‫‪ .١‬اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ أو ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ‪:‬‬

‫هﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬آﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﺮآﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪beautiful‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪difficult‬‬ ‫ﺻﻌﺐ‬

‫‪dangerous‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪correct‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫‪Important‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪Fluent‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻴﺢ‬

‫هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ‪ er‬و ﻻ ‪. est‬‬

‫‪ more‬ﺛﻢ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪than‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت آﻠﻤﺔ‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Jeddah is more beautiful than Riyadh.‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪French is more difficult than English.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Comparing Adjectives‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬

‫‪2.‬‬
‫‪2.Comparing‬‬
‫‪ComparingLong‬‬
‫‪LongAdjectives‬‬
‫‪Adjectives‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺎتاﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔاﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬

‫‪ .٢‬اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ أو ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﺌﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت آﻠﻤﺔ ‪the most‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Amal is the most beautiful girl in her class.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪This is the most important subject in this book.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Comparing Adjectives
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬

2.
2.Comparing
ComparingLong
LongAdjectives
Adjectives ‫اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺎتاﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔاﻟﺼﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺛﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ أﺛﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ good better than the best
‫ﺳﻴﺊ‬ bad worse than the worst
(‫آﺜﻴﺮ )ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺪود‬ many more than the most
(‫آﺜﻴﺮ )ﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪود‬ much
(‫ﻗﻠﻴﻞ )ﻟﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺪود‬ little less than the least
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬ far farther than the farthest

• Adel is better than his brother at school.

• This girl is the worst one in her class.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫‪not as….as‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫‪as……..as‬‬
‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ((‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ))ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻻﺻﻄﻼح ﺣﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎواة ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Ali is as tall as his brother.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪This bag is as big as my bag.‬‬

‫‪not‬‬
‫‪notas……..as‬‬
‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲﻣﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻻﺻﻄﻼح ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎواة ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Ali is not as tall as his brother.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪This bag is not as big as my bag.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Adverbs [‫اﻟﻈﺮوف ]اﻷﺣﻮال‬

• An Adverb always modifies a verb.

ً‫اﻟﻈﺮف ﻳﺼﻒ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ داﺋﻤﺎ‬

• Most adverbs are formed by adding ly to the adjectives.

.‫ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺔ‬ ly ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﻈﺮوف ﺗﻜﻮّن ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬

slow slowly nice nicely

happy happily careful carefully

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbs [‫اﻟﻈﺮوف ]اﻷﺣﻮال‬

There are many kinds of adverbs:

:‫هﻨﺎك ﻋﺪة أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻈﺮوف‬

١. Adverbs of manner: express how an action was done.

.‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ وﻗﻮع اﻟﺤﺪث‬: ‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻠﻮك‬

• I closed the window carefully.

• The soldier fought bravely.

2. Adverbs of time: express the time when an action is or was done.

.‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ زﻣﻦ ﺣﺪوث اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬: ‫ﻇﺮوف اﻟﺰﻣﺎن‬

• I’m going to leave for Cairo tomorrow.

• What’s going to happen next?

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbs [‫اﻟﻈﺮوف ]اﻷﺣﻮال‬

3. Adverbs of place: express when an action is done.

.‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺎن وﻗﻮع اﻟﺤﺪث‬: ‫ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

• I shall stand here.

• I’ve looked everywhere for my lost pen.

Some words that end in ly can be both adjectives or adverbs. Most of them refer to time.
‫ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ‬.‫ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﻇﺮوف أو ﺻﻔﺎت‬ly ‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑـ‬
:‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬.‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
daily ً‫ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‬weekly ً‫أﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎ‬

monthly ‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬ yearly ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬

• A daily newspaper is published daily.

• We get up early to catch an early train.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Adverbs‬‬ ‫اﻟﻈﺮوف ]اﻷﺣﻮال[‬

‫‪4. Adverbs of frequency: tell how often we do something.‬‬

‫اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ‪:‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪد ﻣﺮات ﺣﺪوث اﻟﺸﻲء‪ .‬وﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﻈﺮوف‪:‬‬

‫‪always‬‬ ‫داﺋﻤًﺎ‬ ‫‪often‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬

‫‪usually‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدة‬ ‫‪sometimes‬‬ ‫أﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ‬

‫‪seldom‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎدرًا‬ ‫‪Rarely‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎدراً ﺟﺪًا‬

‫‪Never‬‬ ‫أﺑﺪًا‬ ‫‪Occasionally‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻲ ﻵﺧﺮ‬

‫‪Verb to BE:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻜﻮن‪ :‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻇﺮف اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫‪Ali is always on time.‬‬
‫‪Other Verbs:‬‬ ‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻷﺧﺮى‪ :‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻇﺮف اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫‪Ali sometimes reads a book.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Time
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬

Conjunctions: ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

when, whenever, as, as soon as, while, after, before, until, since

• These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of time with

the main sentence.

.‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
• I found a watch. I was walking in the street.
• I found a watch while I was walking in the street.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Adverbial Clause of Place‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

‫‪Conjunctions:‬‬ ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

‫‪where, wherever‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of place with‬‬
‫‪the main sentence.‬‬

‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Wherever he goes his brother follows him.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Adverbial Clause of Cause‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪Conjunctions:‬‬ ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

‫‪because, since, as‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of cause with‬‬
‫‪the main sentence.‬‬

‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪I stayed at home yesterday because it was raining.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Adverbial Clause of Manner‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻠﻮك‬

‫‪Conjunctions:‬‬ ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

‫‪As, as if, as through‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of manner with the‬‬
‫‪main sentence.‬‬

‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻠﻮك ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫داﺋﻤﺎً ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ as if‬ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪He speaks as if he were a king.‬‬
‫ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ و ﻣﺠﺮد ﺧﻴﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫‪was‬‬ ‫‪ were‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫•‬ ‫‪It looks as if it would rain.‬‬
‫وهﻮ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ و أﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺮد ﺗﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪will‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ would‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Purpose
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻐﺮض‬

Conjunctions: ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

that, so that, in order that
These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of purpose with the main sentence.
.‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻐﺮض ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

a) We use (may + infinitive) when the main verb is in the present or future.
.‫اﻟﻤﺼﺪر( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع أو اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬+‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم )رﺑﻤﺎ‬
:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
„ He works hard. He wishes to succeed.
„ He works hard so that (that or in order that) he may succeed.

b) We use (might + infinitive) when the main verb is in the simple past.
.‫اﻟﻤﺼﺪر( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬+‫ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم )رﺑﻤﺎ‬
:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
„ He was walking quickly in order that he might not be late.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Result
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬

We use: so + adverb + that such + noun+ that

to link the main sentence with the adverbial clause of result.

.‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺎت ﻟﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
• The man is so weak that he can not walk.
• He wrote such good answers that he got he marks.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Contrast
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ‬

Conjunctions: ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

though, although

• These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of contrast

with the main sentence.

.‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
• He is poor. He is happy.
• Although (though) he is poor, he is happy.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Contrast
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬

Conjunctions: ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

as….as, so……as

• These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of contrast

with the main sentence.

.‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
• Nabeel is as clever as his father.
• Sami is not so strong as his brother.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Adverbial Clause of Condition
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬

Conjunctions: ‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬

if, unless
• These words (conjunctions) link the adverbial clause of condition with the
main sentence.

.‫أدوات اﻟﺮﺑﻂ هﺬﻩ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﻈﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
• If we are ill, we go to bed.
• If we work hard, we will succeed.
• If we worked hard, we would succeed.
• If he had fallen, he would have hurt himself.
• Unless the rain falls, the crops will not grow.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ]ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ [‬
‫‪not as….as‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫‪as……..as‬‬
‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ[[‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ]]ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻻﺻﻄﻼح ﺣﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎواة ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Ahmed drives as dangerously as his brother.‬‬

‫‪not‬‬
‫‪notas……..as‬‬
‫‪as……..as‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻪﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲﻣﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻻﺻﻄﻼح ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻣﺴﺎواة ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Hamad does not drive as dangerously as his brother.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم هﻮ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎً‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل هﻮ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮم‬
‫أو ﻗﻠﻴﻞ اﻷهﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫هﻨﺎك ﻋﺪة أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‪:‬‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Statements‬‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫•‬ ‫‪Questions‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠـــــــــــﺔ‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Command‬‬ ‫اﻷﻣـــــــــــــﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪A.‬‬
‫‪A. Statements‬‬
‫‪Statements‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬

‫‪Ahmed broke the window yesterday.‬‬

‫‪ Active‬وذﻟﻚ ﻷن اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮم وهﻮ‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪Ahmed‬‬
‫______________________________________________________‬
‫‪The window was broken yesterday.‬‬
‫‪The window was broken (by Ahmed) yesterday.‬‬
‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل ‪ Passive‬وذﻟﻚ ﻷن اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮم‬
‫وهﻮ ‪ Ahmed‬آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ أو وﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ by‬آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺎً ﺑــ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪A.‬‬
‫‪A. Statements‬‬
‫‪Statements‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم ‪ Active‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪ Passive‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺎﻋﻼً‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ زﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺎً ﺑــ ‪ by‬وﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻄﺐ إذا آﺎن ﺿﻤﻴﺮاً‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫أي زﻳﺎدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ دون ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Active & Passive
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

A.
A. Statements
Statements ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬

:‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

Active ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم‬ Passive ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

Ali writes letters. Letters are written (by Ali).

Huda wrote the lesson. The lesson was written (by Huda).

Saleh will buy a car. A car will be bought (by Saleh).

Khaled is helping Ahmed. Ahmed is being helped (by Ali).

She has eaten the apple. The apple has been eaten (by her).

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪A.‬‬
‫‪A. Statements‬‬
‫‪Statements‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪to be‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺮف ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫‪am, is, are‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫‪was, were‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫‪shall be, will be‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫‪am being, is being, are being‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬

‫‪was being, were being‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬

‫‪has been, have been‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺘﺎم‬

‫‪had been‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺘﺎم‬

‫‪can be, could be, may be, might be, must be, ought‬‬ ‫آﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫‪to be‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪B.‬‬
‫‪B. Questions‬‬
‫‪Questions‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم ‪ Active‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪ Passive‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺎﻋﻼً‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ زﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﻊ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺎً ﺑــ ‪ by‬وﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻄﺐ إذا آﺎن ﺿﻤﻴﺮاً‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫أي زﻳﺎدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ دون ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Active & Passive
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

B.
B. Questions
Questions ‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬

:‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

Active ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم‬ Passive ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

Does Ahmed write letters? Are Letters written (by Ali)?

Did he eat the cake?. Was the cake eaten (by him)?

Will Ali buy a new car? Will a new car be bought (by Ali)?

Why is he using a pen? Ahmed is being helped (by Ali).

Who broke the window? By whom the window was broken?

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪C.‬‬
‫‪C. Command‬‬
‫‪Command‬‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم ‪ Active‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪ Passive‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ let‬ﻓﻲ أول اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺎﻋﻼً‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮدﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ أي اﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻴﻜﻮن ‪. be‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Active & Passive
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

C.
C. Command
Command ‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬

:‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

Active ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم‬ Passive ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

Write the lesson. Let the lesson be written.

Open the door. Let the door be opened.

Send this letter to your friend. Let this letter be sent to your friend.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Active & Passive‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم و اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈـــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈـــــــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل ﻣﻨﻔﻴﺔ أو ﺳﺆاﻻً ﻣﺬﻳﻼً ﻟﺬا ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال أو اﻟﺘﺬﻳﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‪.‬‬
‫أﻣﺜﻠـــــــــــــــــــﺔ‬

‫‪Active‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮم‬ ‫‪Passive‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬

‫‪Ali does not write letters‬‬ ‫‪Letters are not written (by Ali).‬‬

‫?‪Dickens wrote those novels, didn’t he‬‬ ‫‪Those novels were written by Dickens,‬‬
‫?‪weren’t they‬‬
‫?‪Dickens didn’t write that play, did he‬‬ ‫?‪That play wasn’t written by Dickens, was it‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Transitive & Intransitive Verbs‬‬
‫اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ و اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫)اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ( ‪:Intransitive Verbs‬‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪The sun rises.‬‬
‫)اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ( ‪:Intransitive Verbs‬‬
‫هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪاً أو أآﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ali raised his hand.‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬

‫*اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل ﻟﻌﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬أﻣﺎ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮي أﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‪.‬‬
‫*هﻨﺎك ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻓﻌﺎل اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻟﺬا ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮل‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪Ahmed gave Huda a flower .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻨﻰ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ‬

‫‪a) Huda was given a flower (by Ahmed).‬‬

‫)‪b) A flower was given to Huda (by Ahmed‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ وﺿﻊ ‪ to‬ﻟﻠﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ اﻟﻌﺎﻗﻞ ‪ Huda‬ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Prepositions‬‬
‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ آﺜﻴﺮة و ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ‬

‫أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬و‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ هﻲ اﻟﺘﺪرب ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺟﻤﻞ و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ آﺤﺮوف ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪A preposition shows the relation between the subject and the object.‬‬
‫‪There are also prepositions of time and prepositions of place.‬‬

‫ﺗﺪل ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ و اﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮل ﺑﻪ و ﻳﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﺮوف ﺟﺮ داﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ و ﺣﺮوف ﺟﺮ داﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

on
Day ‫اﻷﻳﺎم‬ On Monday

Day + morning, night ‫ اﻟﻔﺘﺮة‬+ ‫اﻷﻳﺎم‬ On Friday morning

Afternoon, evening, date ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ My birthday is on June 10.

Special days ‫أﻳﺎم ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ I will travel on National Day.

To mean above ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻓﻮق‬ The tea is on the table.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

in
Season ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ The trees grow in spring.

Year ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‬ I was born in 1968.

Month ‫ﺷﻬﺮ‬ The test is in May.

The morning ‫اﻟﺼﺒﺎح‬ I go to work in the morning.

The evening ‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎء‬ I go home in the evening

To mean above ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪاﺧﻞ‬ He is in the mosque.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

at
Time ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ I will come back at 2 o’
o’clock.

Festival ‫اﻷﻋﻴﺎد و اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻻت‬ I will meat you at the school festival.

Meal times ‫أوﻗﺎت اﻟﻮﺟﺒﺎت‬ I will talk to my father at lunch.

The weekend ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺳﺒﻮع‬ We will travel at the weekend.

Noon ‫اﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬ We pray at noon everyday.

Night ‫اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ We sleep at night.

To mean place ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎن‬ He is at the grocer’

grocer’s.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions of Place ‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

at at an exact place ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺤﺪد‬ He lives at number 5, King Fahad Street.

at work ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ Ahmed is at work.

at the table ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺎوﻟﺔ‬ They are standing at the dinner table

under ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ The cat is under the table.

in front of ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ أﻣﺎم‬ The teacher is in front of the class.

to direction/place ‫اﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬/‫ﻣﻜﺎن‬ I go to school everyday.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions of Place ‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

in To mean inside ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ داﺧﻞ‬ Put this book in the box.

In a country ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ‬ I live in Saudi Arabia.

In a town./street ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎرع‬/‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬ I live in Al-

Al-Madina.

in bed ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺮاش‬ The baby is in bed.

In a building or area ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ أو‬ You were in the club last night.
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
In a chair ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ‬ Ali is sitting in his chair.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
Prepositions of Place ‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﺪاﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‬

Prepositions Use ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬

with ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺑـ‬ I write with a pen.

from ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ I am from Riyadh.

behind ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺧﻠﻒ‬ The wall is behind the class.

between ‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ Samah is sitting between Fatma and

Salwa.

on TV ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ Ali watches football on TV every Saturday.

Time ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‬ He arrives on time.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
More Examples ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪاً ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬

Prepositions Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
in ‫ﻓﻲ‬ The medicine is in the bottle.

on ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ The knife is on the table.

at ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب‬،‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ Someone is at the door.

near ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬ Ahmed is sitting near the window.

between ‫ﺑﻴﻦ‬ The house is between the school and the mosque.

opposite ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ The bank is opposite to the post office.

into ‫ ﻓﻲ‬،‫داﺧﻞ‬ The electrician is putting his hand into the TV.

onto ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ The water is spilling onto the floor.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
More Examples ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪاً ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬

Prepositions Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
off ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ The man is falling off the chair.

out of ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮق‬ The child is falling out of the window.

across ‫ ﺧﻼل‬،‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ The carpenter cut across the wood.

over/above ‫ أﻋﻠﻰ‬،‫ﻓﻮق‬ The light is over (above) the table.

under/below ‫ أﺳﻔﻞ‬،‫ﺗﺤﺖ‬ The fire is under (below) the stairs.

through ‫ ﺧﻼل‬،‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ The ball is going through the window.

among ‫وﺳﻂ‬ The teacher is sitting among the students.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
More Examples ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪاً ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬

Prepositions Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
in ‫ﻓﻲ‬ The medicine is in the bottle.

on ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ The knife is on the table.

at ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب‬،‫ﻋﻨﺪ‬ Someone is at the door.

near ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬ Ahmed is sitting near the window.

between ‫ﺑﻴﻦ‬ The house is between the school and the mosque.

opposite ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ The bank is opposite to the post office.

into ‫ ﻓﻲ‬،‫داﺧﻞ‬ The electrician is putting his hand into the TV.

onto ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ The water is spilling onto the floor.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Use of Prepositions
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
More Examples ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪاً ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬

Prepositions Example ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬

‫ﺣﺮوف اﻟﺠﺮ‬
round ‫ﺣﻮل‬ The car is going round the tree.

in front of ‫أﻣﺎم‬ The child is sitting in front of the TV.

behind ‫ وراء‬،‫ﺧﻠﻒ‬ The headmaster is sitting behind the pupils.

on top of ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،‫ﻓﻮق‬ The sweets are on top of the table.

at the side of ‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ The garage is at the side of the house.

along ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل‬ The man is walking along the street.

next to ‫ﺑﺠﻮار‬ The bank is next to the baker’s.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Question-Tags‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻳﻠﺔ‬

‫هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻳﻠﺔ وهﻲ ﺗﻌﺎدل‬

‫”أﻟﻴﺲ آﺬﻟﻚ؟“ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬وهﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﺳﺆال ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻪ وهﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ اﻹﺛﺒﺎت أو أﻟﻨﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈذا آﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن هﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻔﻲ و إذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫* أﻣﺎ ﺟﻮاب هﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال ﻓﻴﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻹﺛﺒﺎت أو اﻟﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫أي ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ اﻟﺴﺆال‪.‬‬
‫* هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺪاول آﺜﻴﺮاً ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﺪث ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ إﻻ أﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Question-Tags‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪Questions‬‬
‫‪Questionsthat‬‬
‫‪thatwe‬‬ ‫‪weexpect‬‬
‫‪expectthe‬‬
‫‪theanswer‬‬
‫”‪answer“Yes‬‬
‫”‪“Yes‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ““‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎﺑـﺑـ““ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﻗﻊاﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔﻧﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ هﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال و اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫?‪* There’s a supermarket near here, isn’t there‬‬
‫‪Yes , there is.‬‬
‫*اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺖ هﺬا اﻟﺴﺆال ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻟﺬا ﺟﺎء اﻟﺴﺆال ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )اﻟﺘﺬﻳﻴﻞ( ﻣﻨﻔﻴﺎً‪ .‬أﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻮاب ﻓﻴﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﻹﺛﺒﺎت ‪. Yes‬‬
‫‪ not‬ﺑﻌﺪﻩ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫* وﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﻜﻮن ﺳﺆاﻻً ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻧﻘﺪم اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻀﻊ‬

‫و اﻵن اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫?‪* You come from the United States, don’t you‬‬
‫‪Yes, I do.‬‬
‫‪ do‬وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﺪم وﺟﻮد ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﺗﻢ ﺗﺬﻳﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺆال ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Question-Tags‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪Questions‬‬
‫‪Questionsthat‬‬ ‫‪thatwe‬‬ ‫‪weexpect‬‬
‫‪expectthe‬‬
‫‪theanswer‬‬
‫”‪answer“No‬‬
‫”‪“No‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎﺑـﺑـ““ﻻﻻ““‬
‫اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﻗﻊاﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔﻧﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫أﺳﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫?‪1) You don’t come from Saudi Arabia, do you‬‬
‫‪No, I don’t.‬‬
‫?‪2) It doesn’t take long time be car, does it‬‬
‫‪No, it doesn’t.‬‬

‫آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪do/does‬‬ ‫*ﻻﺣﻆ هﻨﺎ أن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻓﻲ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﺬا اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ‬

‫?‪٣) You didn’t travel last year, did you‬‬

‫‪No, I didn’t.‬‬

‫آﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪did‬‬ ‫*ﻻﺣﻆ هﻨﺎ أن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻓﻲ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﺬا اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫”‪Conditional “if‬‬
‫”ﻟﻮ“ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪if + present‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ أول ‪will +‬‬

‫هﺬا اﻟﺤﺪث ﻣﻤﻜﻦ وﻗﻮﻋﻪ‪.‬‬

‫)إن ﺗﻤﻄﺮ ﻏﺪاً ‪ ،‬ﺳﺄﺑﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﺖ( ‪If it rains tomorrow, I will stay at home.‬‬

‫‪If you eat too much, you will become fat.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫”‪Conditional “if‬‬
‫”ﻟﻮ“ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ‪if + past‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ أول ‪would +‬‬

‫هﺬا اﻟﺤﺪث ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ أو ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ وﻗﻮﻋﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪If Shakespeare lived today, he would use different English.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺷﻜﺴﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﺣﻴﺎً اﻟﻴﻮم‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ أﻳﻀﺎً أﻧﻨﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫و اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ )اﻟﻤﺼﺪر ‪ ( would +‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ وهﺬﻩ هﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪:‬‬

‫‪if + subject + past‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ أول ‪subject+ would +‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ أﻳﻀﺎً أن ‪ be‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ ‪ were‬ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة و ﻻ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ was‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ‬
‫آﺎن اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻔﺮداً‪.‬‬
‫‪If I were you, I would buy a new car.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Conditional “if”
‫”ﻟﻮ“ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬

3) if + had + ‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‬ would have + ‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‬

If he had lived in Taif, he would have been happy.

If he had visited Makkah, he would have seen the Ka’aba.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫”‪Conditional “if‬‬
‫”ﻟﻮ“ اﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪if + present‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪present‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ داﺋﻤﺔ و ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪If you boil water, it becomes steam.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻮ أﻧﻨﺎ ﻏﻠﻴﻨﺎ اﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺨﺎراً(‬
‫و هﺬﻩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﻴﺪة ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺬا ﺟﺎءت آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ becomes‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع و‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬

‫)‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪if + present‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ‪instructions‬‬

‫‪If the radio is too loud, turn it off.‬‬ ‫‪Or‬‬ ‫‪Turn the radio off if it is too loud.‬‬

‫‪If you are under 17, don’t drive a car. Or‬‬ ‫‪Don’t drive a car if you are under 17.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 ‫‪Reported Speech‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
‫هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ أﻳﻀﺎً اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Indirect Speech‬‬
‫‪There are four kinds of direct and Indirect Speech.‬‬
‫هﻨﺎك أرﺑﻌﺔ أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ و ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ ‪1) Statement‬‬

‫‪2) Question‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫‪3) Command‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫‪4) Exclamation‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Reported Speech‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
‫‪Statement‬‬
‫‪Statement‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫إﻟﻰ آﻼم ﻣﻨﻘﻮل ‪ Reported‬ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫* ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Direct‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻧﻀﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ أو اﻟﻀﻤﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ اﻟﻘﻮل ‪said‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻧﻀﻊ أداة اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ‪ that‬و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻧﺤﻮل اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ و أهﻢ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪he, she‬‬ ‫‪we‬‬ ‫‪they‬‬
‫‪My‬‬ ‫‪his, her‬‬ ‫‪our‬‬ ‫‪their‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻧﺤﻮل اﻷزﻣﻨﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪Present‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ‪Past‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ‪Past‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺗﺎم ‪Past Perfect‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﻧﺤﻮل ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت إن وﺟﺪت آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫اﻵن ‪Now‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ‪then‬‬
‫هﻨﺎ ‪here‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ‪there‬‬
‫هﻨﺎ ‪Last night‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ‪the night before‬‬
‫هﻨﺎ ‪this‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ‪that‬‬
‫هﻨﺎ ‪yesterday‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ‪the day before‬‬
‫هﻨﺎ ‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫هﻨﺎك ‪the following day‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reported Speech
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
Statement
Statement ‫اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔاﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬

Direct ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ Indirect ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

“I live in Riyadh”
Riyadh” He said that he lived in Riyadh.

“We are happy”

happy” They said that they were happy.

She said: "I have not been in the school library She said that she had not been to the school library
recently”
recently”. recently.
He said to me: "I shall see you tomorrow”
tomorrow”. He told me that he would see me the next day.
day.
:‫واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ أﺿﺎف‬ and added that :‫( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺘﻜﻠﻢ واﺣﺪ ﻧﻀﻊ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرة‬.) ‫إذا آﺎن هﻨﺎك‬

They said to him: “We shall see you tomorrow. We They told him that they would see him the next day
shall visit Ahmed”
Ahmed”. and added that they would visit Ahmed.
:‫ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ أزﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ إﻧﻤﺎ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬say, says ‫إذا آﺎﻧﺖ آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻮل‬

She says: “I will cook the food tomorrow”

tomorrow”. She says that she will cook the food tomorrow.

We say: “We are playing football now”

now”. We say that we are playing football now.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Reported Speech‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
‫‪Question‬‬
‫‪Question‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬

‫إﻟﻰ آﻼم ﻣﻨﻘﻮل ‪ Reported‬ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫* ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﺆال ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Direct‬‬
‫‪ -١‬اﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪ asked‬ﻳﺤﺪد زﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺆال ‪ ،‬وهﻲ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ‪Present‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ‪Past‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ‪Past‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺗﺎم ‪Past Perfect‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬إذا آﺎن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أداة ﺳﺆال ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ آﺄداة رﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﺆال إﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﺒﺮﻳﺔ و هﻮ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reported Speech
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
Question
Question ‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬

Direct ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ Indirect ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

“What is your name?”
name?”. He asked me what my name was.
was.

“Why are you late?”

late?” The teacher asked me why I was late.
late.
“Where is your book?”
book?”. He asked me where my book was.
was.
:‫ آﺄداة رﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺴﺆال اﻟﺬي ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أداة ﺳﺆال‬if ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬

“Is your school very large?”

large?”. He asked me if my school was very large.
large.
.‫ اﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ و ﺣﻮل اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬does ‫أو‬ do ‫إذا آﺎن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻳﺒﺪأ أو ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬

“Where do you live”

live”. He asked me where I lived.
lived.
“Does he go to school?”
school?”. I asked him if he went to school.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reported Speech
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
Question
Question ‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬
‫اﻟﺴﺆال‬

Direct ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ Indirect ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

.( had + ‫اﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ و ﺣﻮل اﻟﻔﻌﻞ إﻟﻰ زﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ )ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‬ did ‫إذا آﺎن اﻟﺴﺆال ﻳﺒﺪأ أو ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬

“Where did you go yesterday?”

yesterday?”. Sami asked me where I had gone the day before.
before.
“Did Ahmed buy a new car?”
car?”. Ali asked me if Ahmed had bought a new car.

:‫ﻣﻀﺎرع ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ أزﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ إﻧﻤﺎ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬ ask, asks ‫إذا آﺎﻧﺖ آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺆال‬

“Who is your English teacher?”

teacher?”. They ask me who my English teacher is.
is.
“What are your marks?”
marks?”. He asks me what my marks are.
are.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Reported Speech‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
‫‪Command‬‬
‫‪Command‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬

‫إﻟﻰ آﻼم ﻣﻨﻘﻮل ‪ Reported‬ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات‬ ‫‪Direct‬‬

‫* ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ( ordered‬إذا آﺎن اﻟﻜﻼم ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -١‬ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ) أﻣﺮ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ ( begged‬إذا آﺎن اﻟﻜﻼم ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺮﺟﺎء و اﻟﺘﻮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫و ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ) رﺟﺎء‬
‫( إذا آﺎن اﻟﻜﻼم ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪advised‬‬ ‫و ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ) ﻧﺼﺢ‬
‫( إذا آﺎن اﻟﻜﻼم ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ إﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺴﺎوﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪told‬‬ ‫و ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ) أﺧﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬اﺣﺬف اﻷﻗﻮاس اﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ و ﺿﻊ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪ to‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬

‫‪ -٣‬اﺣﺬف آﻠﻤﺘﻲ ‪ Please, do‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ إن وﺟﺪﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت و اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ وآﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reported Speech
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
Command
Command ‫اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬

Direct ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ Indirect ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

He said to the servant: “bring me a He ordered the servant to bring him a
glass of water”. glass of water.
The son said to his father: “please , The son begged his father to give him
give me some money”. some money.
The doctor said to me: “Drink a lot of The doctor advised me to drink a lot of
water”. water.
He said to me: “Do not go to the He told me not to go to the market that
market tonight”. night.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 ‫‪Reported Speech‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
‫‪Exclamation‬‬
‫‪Exclamation‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬
‫إﻟﻰ آﻼم ﻣﻨﻘﻮل ‪ Reported‬ﻧﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات‬ ‫‪Direct‬‬
‫* ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬اﺣﺬف آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ وﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻨﻬﺎ آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪With regret‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪم‬ ‫‪With anger‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﻀﺐ‬

‫‪With joy‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮح‬ ‫‪With admiration‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺠﺎب‬
‫‪With sadness‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺰن‬

‫‪ -٢‬اﺣﺬف اﻷﻗﻮاس و ﺿﻊ آﻠﻤﺔ ‪that‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت و اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋﺮ و اﻷﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ وآﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺨﺒﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪how, what‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬آﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ إﻣﺎ ﺣﺮف اﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎم اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ آﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫أو آﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﺬاﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ Alas, Hurrah, Oh :‬و ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ !‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
 Reported Speech
‫اﻟﻜﻼم اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮل‬
Exclamation
Exclamation ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ‬

Direct ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ Indirect ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

He said : “Alas! I will not find my He said with sorrow that he would not
money”. find his money.
He said : “How foolish I have been”. He said with regret that he had been
foolish.

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
 Countries and Nationalities
‫اﻟﺒﻠﺪان و اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺎت‬

:ً‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ﺣﺮف ”ي“ ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻠﺪ و ذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻨﻘﻮل ﻣﺜﻼ‬
‫ﺳﻌﻮدي‬ : ‫اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‬

:‫أﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﺧﻤﺲ ﺣﺮوف ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎﻓﺔ و هﻲ‬

i, n, ian, ish, ese
:‫ وهﺬﻩ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬.‫و ﻟﻴﺲ هﻨﺎك ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺮوف‬

Country Nationality Country Nationality

Saudi Arabia Saudi Britain British
Oman Omani Turkey Turkish
Algeria Algerian China Chinese
Libya Libyan Lebanon Lebanese
Palestine Palestinian France French
Syria Syrian Switzerland Swiss
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬